blob: 1be16c572e9ebc7627ea7f6f3907cf16ee7020b8 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000025#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie2be39222018-03-21 22:34:23 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000032#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000036#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000037#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000038#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
47#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000051#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
54#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000055#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000057#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000059#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000060#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
61#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
62#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000063#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000064#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000065#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000066#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000067#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000068#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000070#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000071#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000072#include <cassert>
73#include <climits>
74#include <cstddef>
75#include <cstdint>
76#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000077#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000078#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000079#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000080#include <utility>
81#include <vector>
82
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000083using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000084using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000085
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000086#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
87
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000088// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
89// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
90// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
91// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000092static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
93 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
94 cl::desc(
95 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
96
97static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
98 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
99 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000100
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000101static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000102 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000104
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000108
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000109static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
110 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
111 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
112 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
113 "predicated store"));
114
115static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
116 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
117 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
118 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
119
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000120static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
121 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
122 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
123 "executed"));
124
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000125static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
126 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
127 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
128 "speculatively executed instructions"));
129
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000130STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
133STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
134 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
135STATISTIC(
136 NumLookupTablesHoles,
137 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000138STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
140 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000141STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000142
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000143namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000144
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
146// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
147// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000148using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
149 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
152// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
153// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000154using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
157struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
158 ConstantInt *Value;
159 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000161 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000162 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
165 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
166 return Value < RHS.Value;
167 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000168
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000169 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
170};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000171
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000173 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000174 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000175 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
177
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000178 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000179 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
180 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000182 BasicBlock *Pred,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
185 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000186
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000187 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000188 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000189 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
190 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000191 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000193 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000194 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000195 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
196 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000197
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000198public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000199 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000200 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000201 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000202 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000203
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
205};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
207} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000208
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000209/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000211static bool
212SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000213 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000214 if (SI1 == SI2)
215 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000216
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000217 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
218 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
219 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
220 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
221 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000222
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
224 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000225 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
226 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
227 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
229 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
231 if (FailBlocks)
232 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
233 Fail = true;
234 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000236
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000237 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
241/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
242/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000243static bool
244isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
245 Instruction *Cond,
246 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
247 if (SI1 == SI2)
248 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
250
251 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000252 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
254 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
255 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
256 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000257 if (!Ci2)
258 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
260 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
261 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
262 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
263 return false;
264
265 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
266 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
269 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
272 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000273 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000274 return false;
275 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
276 }
277 return true;
278}
279
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000280/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
281/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
282/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
283/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000284static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
285 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000286 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
287 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000288}
289
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000290/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
291/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
292/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000293/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000294static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000295 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000296 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000297 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000298 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000299}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000300
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000301/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
302/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000303/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
304/// which works well enough for us.
305///
306/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000307/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
308/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
309/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
310/// set and true is returned.
311///
312/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
313/// Select whose cost is 2.
314///
315/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
316/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
317/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000318static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000320 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
322 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000323 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
324 // so limit the recursion depth.
325 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
326 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
327 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
328 return false;
329
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000330 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000331 if (!I) {
332 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
333 // can be executed unconditionally.
334 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
335 if (C->canTrap())
336 return false;
337 return true;
338 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000340
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000341 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000342 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000343 if (PBB == BB)
344 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000345
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
347 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000348 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
349 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000350 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000351 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000352
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000353 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
354 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000355 if (!AggressiveInsts)
356 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000357
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000358 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
360 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000361
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000362 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
363 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
364 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000369
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000370 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
371 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
372 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
373 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
374 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
375 // enabled further IR optimizations.
376 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
377 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000378 return false;
379
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000380 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
381 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382
383 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
384 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000385 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000386 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
387 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000388 return false;
389 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
390 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000391 return true;
392}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000393
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000394/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000395/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000396static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000397 // Normal constant int.
398 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000399 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000400 return CI;
401
402 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
403 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000404 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000405
406 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
407 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
408 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
409
410 // IntToPtr const int.
411 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
412 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
413 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
414 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
415 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
416 return CI;
417 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000418 return cast<ConstantInt>(
419 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000420 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000421 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000422}
423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000425
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000426/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
427/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
428/// structure.
429/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
430/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
431/// representing the different cases for the switch.
432/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
433/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
434/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
435/// fail.
436struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000437 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000438
439 /// Value found for the switch comparison
440 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
441
442 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
443 Value *Extra = nullptr;
444
445 /// Set of integers to match in switch
446 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
447
448 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
449 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000450
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000452 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000453 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000454 }
455
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000458 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000459
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
462 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
463 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000464 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
465 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000466 CompValue = NewVal;
467 return (CompValue != nullptr);
468 }
469
470 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
471 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
472 /// match depending on isEQ).
473 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
474 /// against is placed in CompValue.
475 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
476 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000477 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000478 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
479 ICmpInst *ICI;
480 ConstantInt *C;
481 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000482 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000483 return false;
484 }
485
486 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000487 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488
489 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000490 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000491 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000492 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000493 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
494 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
495
496 /*
497 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
498 x : BITVECTOR(64);
499 y : BITVECTOR(64);
500 z : BITVECTOR(64);
501 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
502 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
503 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
504 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000505 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
506 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
507 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000508 */
509
510 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
511 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
512 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
514 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
515 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
516 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
517
518 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
519 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
520 //
521 // mask = (1 << z)
522 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
523 //
524 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
525 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
526
527 // Pattern match a special case:
528 /*
529 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
530 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
531 );
532 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000534 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
535 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000536 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000538 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 return false;
540
541 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000543 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
544 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000545 UsedICmps++;
546 return true;
547 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000548 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000550 // Pattern match a special case:
551 /*
552 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
553 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
554 );
555 */
556 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
557 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
558 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
559 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
560 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
561 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
562 return false;
563
564 Vals.push_back(C);
565 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
566 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
567 UsedICmps++;
568 return true;
569 }
570 }
571
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000573 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000574 return false;
575
576 UsedICmps++;
577 Vals.push_back(C);
578 return ICI->getOperand(0);
579 }
580
581 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000582 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
583 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584
585 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
586 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
587 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000588 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
589 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
591 }
592
593 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
594 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
595 // x != 0 && x != 1.
596 if (!isEQ)
597 Span = Span.inverse();
598
599 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000600 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000602 }
603
604 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000605 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000606 return false;
607
608 // Add all values from the range to the set
609 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
610 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000611
612 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000613 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000614 }
615
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000616 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
618 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
619 /// vector.
620 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000621 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000622 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
623 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000624
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
626 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000627 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000630 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000631 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000633 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000634 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000635
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000636 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
637 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
638 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000639 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
640 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
641 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
642 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000643 continue;
644 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000647 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000648 // Match succeed, continue the loop
649 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000650 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
653 // comparison against the same value as the others.
654 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
655 if (!Extra) {
656 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000657 continue;
658 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000659 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
660 CompValue = nullptr;
661 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000662 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000663 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000664};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000665
666} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000667
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000668static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000669 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000670 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
671 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
672 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
673 if (BI->isConditional())
674 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000675 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
676 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000677 }
678
679 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000680 if (Cond)
681 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000682}
683
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000684/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000685/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000686Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000687 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000688 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
689 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
690 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000691 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
692 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
693 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000694 CV = SI->getCondition();
695 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000696 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000698 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000699 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000701
702 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000703 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000704 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
705 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000706 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000707 CV = Ptr;
708 }
709 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000710 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000711}
712
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000713/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000714/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000715BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
716 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000717 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000718 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000719 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
720 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
721 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000722 return SI->getDefaultDest();
723 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000724
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000725 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000726 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000727 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000728 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
729 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000730 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000731}
732
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000733/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000734/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000735static void
736EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
737 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000738 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000739}
740
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000741/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
743 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000744 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
745
746 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
747 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
748 std::swap(V1, V2);
749
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000750 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000751 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000752 if (V1->size() == 1) {
753 // Just scan V2.
754 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
755 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
756 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
757 return true;
758 }
759
760 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
761 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
762 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
763 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
764 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
765 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
766 return true;
767 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
768 ++i1;
769 else
770 ++i2;
771 }
772 return false;
773}
774
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000775// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
776// least one non-zero weight.
777static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
778 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
779 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
780 MDNode *N = nullptr;
781 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
782 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
783 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
784}
785
786// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
787// exactly 2 weights.
788static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
789 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
790 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
791 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
792 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
793 MDNode *N = nullptr;
794 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
795 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
796 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
797 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
798}
799
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000800/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
801/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
802/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
803/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
804/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000805bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
806 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000807 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000808 if (!PredVal)
809 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000810
811 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
812 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000813 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
814 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000815
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000816 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
817 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
818
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000819 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000820 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 BasicBlock *PredDef =
822 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
823 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000824
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000825 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000828 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000829
830 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
831 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
832 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
833 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
834 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
835 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000836 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000837 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000838
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000839 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
840 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
841 // uncond br.
842 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
843 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000844 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000845 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000846
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000847 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000848 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000849
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000850 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000851 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
852 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000853
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000854 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
855 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000856 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000857
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000858 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
859 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000860 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000861 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
862 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000864 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000865 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000866
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000867 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
868 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000869 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000870 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
871 if (HasWeight)
872 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
873 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000874 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000875 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
876 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000877 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
878 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000879 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000880 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000882 Weights.pop_back();
883 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000884 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000885 SI->removeCase(i);
886 }
887 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000888 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000889 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000890
891 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000892 return true;
893 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000894
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
896 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000897 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000899 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
900 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000901 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000903 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
904 }
905 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000906
907 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
908 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000909 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000910 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
911 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
912 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
913 break;
914 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000915
916 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000917 if (!TheRealDest)
918 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000919
920 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
921 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000922 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
923 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
924 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000925 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000926 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000927
928 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000929 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000930 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000931
932 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000933 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
934 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000935
936 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
937 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000938}
939
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000940namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000941
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000942/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
943/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
944/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
945struct ConstantIntOrdering {
946 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
947 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
948 }
949};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000950
951} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000952
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000953static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
954 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
955 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
956 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000957 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000958 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000959 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000960}
961
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000962static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000963 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000964 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000965 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
967
968 return false;
969}
970
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000971/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
972/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
973/// metadata.
974static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
975 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000976 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 assert(MD);
978 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000979 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000980 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 }
982
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000983 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
984 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
985 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000986 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000987 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
988 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
989 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
990 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000991 }
992}
993
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000994/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000995static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000996 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
997 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
998 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
999 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1000 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001001 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001002}
1003
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001004/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1005/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001006/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1007/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001008bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1009 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001011 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1013 bool Changed = false;
1014
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001015 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001017 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001018
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1020 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001021 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001022
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001023 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001024 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1026 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001027 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001028 return false;
1029 }
1030 }
1031
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1035
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001036 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001037 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1038
1039 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1040 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1041 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001042 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001043
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001044 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1045 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001046 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1047 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1048
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001049 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001050 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001051 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001052 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1053 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1054 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001055 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1056 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1057 // successor's weights
1058 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001059
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001060 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001061 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001062 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001063 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001064 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1065 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1066 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001067 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001068
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001069 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1070 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1071 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001072 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1075 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1076 else {
1077 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1078 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001079
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001080 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1081 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001082 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1083 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001084 Weights.pop_back();
1085 }
1086
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001087 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001088 --i;
1089 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001090 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001091
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001092 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001093 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1094 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1095 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1096 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1097 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001098
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001099 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1100 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001101 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1102 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1103 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1104 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1105 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001106 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1107 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1108 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1109 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001110 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1111 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001112 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001113 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001114
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001115 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1116 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1117 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1118 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1119 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1120 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1121 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1122 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001123 } else {
1124 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1125 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1126 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001127 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1128 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001129 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1130 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1131 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001132
1133 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001134 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1135 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001136 Weights.pop_back();
1137 }
1138
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001139 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1140 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001141 --i;
1142 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001143 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001144
1145 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1146 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001147 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1148 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1149 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001150 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1151 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001152 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1153 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001154 PTIHandled.erase(
1155 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001156 }
1157
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001158 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1159 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001160 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001161 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001162 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1163 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001164 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001165 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001166 }
1167
1168 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1169 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1170 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001171 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1172 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001173
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001174 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001175 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001176 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001177 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001178 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001179 }
1180
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001181 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001182 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1183 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001184 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001185 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1186 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001187
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001188 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1189 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1190 FitWeights(Weights);
1191
1192 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1193
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001194 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001195 }
1196
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001197 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001198
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001199 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1200 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1201 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001202 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001203 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1204 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001205 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001206 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001207 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001208 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1209 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001210 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001211 }
1212 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1213 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001214
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001215 Changed = true;
1216 }
1217 }
1218 return Changed;
1219}
1220
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001221// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1222// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1223// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001224static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1225 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001226 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001227 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1228 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1229 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001230 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001231 return false;
1232 }
1233 }
1234 }
1235 return true;
1236}
1237
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001238static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001240/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1241/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1242/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001243static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001244 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1246 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1247 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1248 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1249 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001250 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1251 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001252
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001253 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1254 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1255
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001256 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001257 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1258 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1259 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1260 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1261 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1262 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1263 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1264 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1265 }
1266 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1267 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1268 return false;
1269
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001270 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001271
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001272 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001273 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1275 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1276 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1277 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001278
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001279 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1280 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1281 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1282 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1283 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1284 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1285 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1286 if (C1 && C2)
1287 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001288 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001289
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001290 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1291 return Changed;
1292
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001293 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1294 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1295 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1296 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1297 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1298 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1299 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1300 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1301 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1302 Changed = true;
1303 } else {
1304 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1305 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1306 // the now redundant second instruction.
1307 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1308 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1309 if (!I2->use_empty())
1310 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1311 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1312 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1313 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1314 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1315 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1319 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1320 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1321 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
1322 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001323
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001324 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1325 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1326 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001327
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001328 I2->eraseFromParent();
1329 Changed = true;
1330 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001331
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001332 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1333 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001334 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1335 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1336 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1337 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1338 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1339 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1340 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1341 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1342 }
1343 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1344
1345 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001346
1347HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001348 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1349 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001350 return Changed;
1351
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001352 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001353 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1354 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1355 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001356 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1357 continue;
1358
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001359 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1360 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001361 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1362 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001363 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001364
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001365 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001366 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001367 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001368 return Changed;
1369 }
1370 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001371
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001372 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001373 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001374 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001375 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001376 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1377 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001378 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001379 }
1380
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001381 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001382 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1383 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1384 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1385 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001386 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001387 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001388 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1389 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1390 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001391 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1392 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001393
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001394 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1395 // that determines the right value.
1396 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001397 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001398 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1399 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1400 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001401
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001402 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001403 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1404 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1405 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001406 }
1407 }
1408
1409 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001410 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1411 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001412
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001413 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001414 return true;
1415}
1416
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001417// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1418// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1419// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1420// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1421// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1422static bool canSinkInstructions(
1423 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1424 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001425 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1426 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1427 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1428 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1429 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1430 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1431 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1432 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001433
1434 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1435 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1436 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1437 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1438 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1439 return false;
1440
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001441 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1442 // have no uses.
1443 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1444 return false;
1445 }
1446
1447 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1448 for (auto *I : Insts)
1449 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1450 return false;
1451
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001452 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1453 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1454 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1455 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001456 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1457 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001458 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001459 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001460 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001461 return (PNUse &&
1462 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1463 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1464 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001465 }))
1466 return false;
1467 }
1468
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001469 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1470 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1471 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1472 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1473 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1474 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1475 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1476 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1477 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1478 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1479 }))
1480 return false;
1481 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1482 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1483 }))
1484 return false;
1485
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001486 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1487 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1488 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1489 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001490
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001492 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1493 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001494 };
1495 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1496 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1497 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1498 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001499 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1500 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001501 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1502 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001503 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001504 for (auto *I : Insts)
1505 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001506 }
1507 }
1508 return true;
1509}
1510
1511// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1512// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1513// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001514static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001515 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1516
1517 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1518 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1519 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001520 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1521 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1522 do {
1523 I = I->getPrevNode();
1524 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1525 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1526 Insts.push_back(I);
1527 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001528
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001529 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1530 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1531 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1532 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001533 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001534 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1535 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1536 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1537 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1538 return U == PNUse;
1539 }))
1540 return false;
1541 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001542
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001543 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1544 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001545 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1546 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1547 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1548 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1549 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1550 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1551 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1552 // small mess we may make.
1553 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1554 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1555 });
1556 if (!NeedPHI) {
1557 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1558 continue;
1559 }
1560
1561 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1562 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1563 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1564 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1565 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1566 for (auto *I : Insts)
1567 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1568 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1569 }
1570
1571 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1572 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1573 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1574 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1575 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1576
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001577 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001578 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001579 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001580 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1581 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1582 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1583 // loop below.
1584 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1585 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1586 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1587 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001588 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001589 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1590 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001591
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001592 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1593 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1594 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1595 // instruction and nuke it.
1596 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1597 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1598 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1599 PN->eraseFromParent();
1600 }
1601
1602 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1603 for (auto *I : Insts)
1604 if (I != I0)
1605 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001606
1607 return true;
1608}
1609
1610namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001611
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001612 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1613 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1614 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1615 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1616 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1617 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1618 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1619 // ...
1620 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1621 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1622 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1623 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001624
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001625 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001626 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001627 reset();
1628 }
1629
1630 void reset() {
1631 Fail = false;
1632 Insts.clear();
1633 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001634 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1635 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1636 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1637 if (!Inst) {
1638 // Block wasn't big enough.
1639 Fail = true;
1640 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001641 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001642 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001643 }
1644 }
1645
1646 bool isValid() const {
1647 return !Fail;
1648 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001649
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001650 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001651 if (Fail)
1652 return;
1653 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001654 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1655 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001656 // Already at beginning of block.
1657 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 Fail = true;
1659 return;
1660 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001661 }
1662 }
1663
1664 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1665 return Insts;
1666 }
1667 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001668
1669} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001670
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001671/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1672/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1673/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1674/// than one).
1675static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001676 // We support two situations:
1677 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1678 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1679 //
1680 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1681 // else-if patterns;
1682 //
1683 // if (a) f(1);
1684 // else if (b) f(2);
1685 //
1686 // produces:
1687 //
1688 // [if]
1689 // / \
1690 // [f(1)] [if]
1691 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001692 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001693 // | [f(2)]|
1694 // \ | /
1695 // [ end ]
1696 //
1697 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1698 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1699 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1700 //
1701 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1702 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1703 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1704 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1705 //
1706 // [if]
1707 // / \
1708 // [x(1)] [if]
1709 // | | \
1710 // | | \
1711 // | [x(2)] |
1712 // \ / |
1713 // [sink.split] |
1714 // \ /
1715 // [ end ]
1716 //
1717 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1718 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001719 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001720 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1721 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1722 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1723 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1724 Cond = T;
1725 else
1726 return false;
1727 }
1728 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001729 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001730
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001731 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001732 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1733 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1734 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1735 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1736 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1737 // PHIOperands.
1738 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1739 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1740 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001741 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001742 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1743 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1744 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1745 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1746 ++ScanIdx;
1747 --LRI;
1748 }
1749
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001750 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001751 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1752 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1753 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1754 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1755 ++NumPHIdValues;
1756 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1757 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1758 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1759 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001760
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001761 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1762 };
1763
1764 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001765 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1766 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1767 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1768 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1769 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1770 LRI.reset();
1771 unsigned Idx = 0;
1772 bool Profitable = false;
1773 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1774 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1775 Profitable = true;
1776 break;
1777 }
1778 --LRI;
1779 ++Idx;
1780 }
1781 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001782 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001783
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1785 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1786 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001787 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001788 // Edges couldn't be split.
1789 return false;
1790 Changed = true;
1791 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001792
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001793 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1794 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1795 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1796 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1797 // per sunk instruction).
1798 //
1799 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1800 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1801 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1802 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1803 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1804 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1805 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1806 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001807 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001808 << "\n");
1809
1810 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1811 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001812 LRI.reset();
1813 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001814 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001815 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001816 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001817 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001818
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001819 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001820 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001821 NumSinkCommons++;
1822 Changed = true;
1823 }
1824 return Changed;
1825}
1826
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001827/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1828/// conditional block.
1829///
1830/// We are looking for code like the following:
1831/// BrBB:
1832/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1833/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1834/// ... // function).
1835/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1836/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1837/// ThenBB:
1838/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1839/// br label EndBB
1840/// EndBB:
1841/// ...
1842/// We are going to transform this into:
1843/// BrBB:
1844/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1845/// ... //
1846/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1847/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1848/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1849/// ...
1850///
1851/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1852/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001853static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1854 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001855 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1856 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001857 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001858
1859 // Volatile or atomic.
1860 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001861 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001862
1863 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1864
1865 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001866 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001867 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001868 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1869 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001870 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001871
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001872 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001873 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001874 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001875
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001876 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1877 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1878 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1879 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1880 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001881 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001882 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001883 }
1884
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001885 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001886}
1887
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001888/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001889///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001890/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1891/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1892/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1893/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1894/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1895///
1896/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1897/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1898/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1899/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1900///
1901///
1902/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1903/// \code
1904/// BB:
1905/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1906/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1907/// ThenBB:
1908/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001909/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001910/// EndBB:
1911/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1912/// ...
1913/// \endcode
1914///
1915/// Into this IR:
1916/// \code
1917/// BB:
1918/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1919/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1920/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1921/// ...
1922/// \endcode
1923///
1924/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001925static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001926 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001927 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1928 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1929 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1930 return false;
1931
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001932 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1933 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1934
1935 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1936 // to swap the select operands later.
1937 bool Invert = false;
1938 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1939 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1940 Invert = true;
1941 }
1942 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1943
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001944 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1945 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1946 // - They are defined in BB, and
1947 // - They have no side effects, and
1948 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1949 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1950
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001951 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1952
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001953 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001954 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1955 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001956 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001957 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001958 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001959 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001960 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001961 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1962 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001963 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001964 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001965
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001966 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001967 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001968 ++SpeculationCost;
1969 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001970 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001971
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001972 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001973 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1974 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1975 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001976 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001977 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001978 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1979 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001980 return false;
1981
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001982 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1983 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1984 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1985
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001986 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001987 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001988 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001989 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001990 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001991 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001992 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1993
1994 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001995 }
1996 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001997
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001998 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1999 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2000 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002001 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2002 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2003 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002004 I != E; ++I)
2005 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002006 ++SpeculationCost;
2007 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002008 return false;
2009 }
2010
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002011 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2012 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002013 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2014 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2015 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002016
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002017 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002018 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002019 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002020 continue;
2021
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002022 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002023 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2024 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002025 return false;
2026
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002027 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002028 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2029 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2030 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002031 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2032
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002033 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2034 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002035 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002036 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2037 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002038 unsigned MaxCost =
2039 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002040 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002041 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002042
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002043 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2044 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2045 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002046 // constant expression.
2047 ++SpeculationCost;
2048 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002049 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002050 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002051
2052 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2053 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002054 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002055 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002056
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002057 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002058 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002059
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002060 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2061 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002062 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002063 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2064 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2065 if (Invert)
2066 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002067 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002068 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002069 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002070 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2071 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002072 }
2073
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002074 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2075 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002076 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002077 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2078
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002079 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002080 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2081 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002082
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002083 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002084 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002085 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2086 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2087 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2088 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2089 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002090
2091 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2092 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2093 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002094
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002095 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002096 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2097 // destinations were inverted.
2098 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002099 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002100 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002101 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002102 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002103 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2104 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002105 }
2106
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002107 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2108 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2109 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2110 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2111 I->eraseFromParent();
2112
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002113 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002114 return true;
2115}
2116
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002117/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002118static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002119 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002120
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002121 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002122 if (Size > 10)
2123 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002124 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002125
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002126 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002127 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002128 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002129 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2131 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002132 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002134 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2135 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002136
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002137 return true;
2138}
2139
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002140/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2141/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2142/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002143static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2144 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002145 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2146 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002147 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2148 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002149 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2150 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002151
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002152 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2153 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002154 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002155 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002156 }
2157
2158 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002159 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2160 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002161
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002162 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002163 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002164 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2165 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2166 }))
2167 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002168
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002169 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2170 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002171 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002172 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002173 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2174 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002176 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2177 // branch to RealDest.
2178 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2179 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002181 if (RealDest == BB)
2182 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002183 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002184 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2185 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002186
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2188 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2189 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2190 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002191 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2192 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2193 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002194 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002196 // Update PHI nodes.
2197 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002198
2199 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2200 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2201 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2202 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002203 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002204 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2205 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2206 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2207 continue;
2208 }
2209 // Clone the instruction.
2210 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002211 if (BBI->hasName())
2212 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002213
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002214 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002215 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2216 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002217 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2218 *i = PI->second;
2219 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002220
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002221 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002222 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002223 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2224 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2225 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002226 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002227 N = nullptr;
2228 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002230 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002231 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002232 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002233 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2234 if (N)
2235 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002236
2237 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2238 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2239 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2240 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 }
2242
2243 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2244 // to EdgeBB instead.
2245 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2246 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2247 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2248 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2249 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2250 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002251
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002252 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002253 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002254 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002255
2256 return false;
2257}
2258
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002259/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2260/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002261static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2262 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002263 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2264 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2265 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2266 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2267 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2268 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002269 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002270 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2271 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2272 return false;
2273
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002274 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2275 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002276 if (!IfCond ||
2277 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2278 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2279 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002281 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2282 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2283 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2284 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2285 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2286 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2287 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2288 if (NumPhis > 2)
2289 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002290
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002291 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2292 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2293 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002294 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002295 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2296 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002297 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2298 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002299
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002300 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2301 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002302 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002303 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002304 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002305 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002306 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002307
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002308 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002309 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002310 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002311 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002312 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002313 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002315 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002316 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2317 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002318 if (!PN)
2319 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002320
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002321 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2322 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2323 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2324 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2325 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2326 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2327 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002328
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002329 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2330 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2331 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2332 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002333 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002334 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2335 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2336 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002337 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002338 } else {
2339 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002340 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2341 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002342 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002343 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002344 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2345 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002346 return false;
2347 }
2348 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002349
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002350 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002351 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002352 } else {
2353 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002354 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2355 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002356 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002358 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2359 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002360 return false;
2361 }
2362 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002364 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002365 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002366
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002367 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2368 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002369 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002370 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002371
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002372 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2373 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002374 if (IfBlock1) {
2375 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2376 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002377 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002378 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002379 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002380 }
2381 if (IfBlock2) {
2382 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2383 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002384 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002385 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002386 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002387 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002389 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2390 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002391 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002392 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002394 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2395 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2396 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002397 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002399
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002400 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2401 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2402 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2403 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002404 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2405 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002406 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002407 return true;
2408}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002409
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002410/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2411/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002412/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002414 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002415 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2416 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2417 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2418 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2419 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002421 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2422 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2423 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002424 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002425 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002426 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002427 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002429 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2431 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2432 // branch into a return.
2433 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2434 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2435 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002436 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002437 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002438 return true;
2439 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002440
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002441 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2442 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2443 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2444 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002445
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002446 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2447 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2448 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2449 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2450 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2451 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2452 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002453
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002454 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2455 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2456 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2457 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2458 // safe.
2459 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2460 if (TCV->canTrap())
2461 return false;
2462 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2463 if (FCV->canTrap())
2464 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002465
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002466 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2467 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2468 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2469 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002470
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002471 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2472 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002473 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002474 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002475 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2476 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2477 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2478 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002479 TrueValue =
2480 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002481 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002482 }
2483
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002484 Value *RI =
2485 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002486
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002487 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002488
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002489 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002490 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002491 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002492
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002493 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2494
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002495 return true;
2496}
2497
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002498/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002500static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002501 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2502 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002503 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2504 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002505 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2506 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2507 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2508 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2509 return true;
2510 }
2511 }
2512 return false;
2513}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002514
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002515/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2516/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2517/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2518static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2519 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2520 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2521 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2522 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2523 bool PredHasWeights =
2524 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2525 bool SuccHasWeights =
2526 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2527 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2528 if (!PredHasWeights)
2529 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2530 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2531 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2532 return true;
2533 } else {
2534 return false;
2535 }
2536}
2537
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002538/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2539/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2540/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002541bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002542 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002543
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002544 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002545 if (BI->isConditional())
2546 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2547 else {
2548 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2549 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002550 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002551 // predecessor.
2552 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2553 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2554 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2555 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2556 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002557 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002558 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002559 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2560 Cond = Curr;
2561 break;
2562 }
2563 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2564 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2565 return false;
2566 }
2567 }
2568
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002569 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002570 return false;
2571 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002572
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002573 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2574 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002575 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002576
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002577 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002578 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002579
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002580 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002581 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2582 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002583
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002584 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002585 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002586
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002587 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2588 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2589 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2590 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2591 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2592 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002593 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002594 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2595 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2596 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002597 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002598 return false;
2599 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2600 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2601 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2602 return false;
2603 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2604 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2605 // and Cond.
2606 ++NumBonusInsts;
2607 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2608 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2609 return false;
2610 }
2611
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002612 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2613 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2614 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2615 if (CE->canTrap())
2616 return false;
2617 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2618 if (CE->canTrap())
2619 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002620
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002621 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002622 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002623 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002624 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2625 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002626
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002627 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2628 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002630
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002631 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2632 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2633 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002634 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002635 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002636 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002637 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2638 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002639 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002640
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002641 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002642 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002643 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002644
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002645 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002646 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002647 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002648 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002649 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002650 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2651 Opc = Instruction::And;
2652 InvertPredCond = true;
2653 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2654 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2655 InvertPredCond = true;
2656 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002657 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002658 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002659 } else {
2660 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2661 continue;
2662 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002663
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002664 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002665 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002666
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002667 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2668 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002669 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002670
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002671 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2672 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2673 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2674 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002675 NewCond =
2676 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002677 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002678
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002679 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002680 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002681 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002682
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002683 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002684 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002685 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2686 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2687 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002688 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002689 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002690 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2692 continue;
2693 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2694 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002695 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002696 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002697
2698 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2699 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2700 // only given the branch precondition.
2701 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2702 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002703 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002704
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002705 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2706 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002707 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002708 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002709
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002710 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2711 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002712 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002713 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002714 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002715 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002716 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002717 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002718
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002719 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002720 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2721 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002722 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2723
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002724 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002725 bool HasWeights =
2726 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2727 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002728 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2729
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002730 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002731 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002732 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2733 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002734 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002735 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002736 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002737 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2738 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2739 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002740 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2741 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2742 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002744 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2745 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2746 }
2747 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002748 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002749 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2750 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002751 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002753 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2754 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2755 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2756 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002757 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2758 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002759 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2760 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2761 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002762 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2763 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2764 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2765
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002766 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2767 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002768 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002769 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002770 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002771 } else {
2772 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2773 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002774 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002775 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002776 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002777 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2779 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2780 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2781 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002782 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2783 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2784 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2785 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002786 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002787 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2788 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002789 } else {
2790 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2791 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2792 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002793 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2794 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002795 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002796 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2797 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2798 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2799 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002800 }
2801 }
2802 // Update PHI Node.
2803 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2804 MergedCond);
2805 }
2806 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2807 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2808 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2809 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002810 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002811
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002812 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2813 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2814 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2815 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2816
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002817 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2818 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2819
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002820 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002821 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2822 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2823 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002824
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002825 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002826 }
2827 return false;
2828}
2829
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002830// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2831// nullptr.
2832static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2833 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2834 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2835 if (!BB)
2836 continue;
2837 for (auto &I : *BB)
2838 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2839 if (S)
2840 // Multiple stores seen.
2841 return nullptr;
2842 else
2843 S = SI;
2844 }
2845 }
2846 return S;
2847}
2848
2849static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2850 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2851 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2852 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2853 //
2854 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2855 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2856 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2857 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2858 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2859 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2860 // one.
2861 //
2862 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2863 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2864 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2865 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2866 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002867
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002868 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2869 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2870 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2871 if (!AlternativeV)
2872 break;
2873
2874 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2875 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2876 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2877 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2878 break;
2879 PHI = nullptr;
2880 }
2881 if (PHI)
2882 return PHI;
2883
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002884 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2885 if (!AlternativeV &&
2886 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2887 return V;
2888
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002889 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002890 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2891 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2892 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002893 PHI->addIncoming(
2894 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002895 return PHI;
2896}
2897
2898static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2899 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2900 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002901 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2902 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002903 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2904 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2905 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2906 };
2907
2908 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2909 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2910 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2911 if (!BB)
2912 return true;
2913 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2914 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2915 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002916 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002917 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002918 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2919 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2920 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2921 ++N;
2922 // Free instructions.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002923 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002924 continue;
2925 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002926 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002927 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002928 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2929 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2930 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002931 };
2932
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002933 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2934 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2935 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002936 return false;
2937
2938 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2939 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2940 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2941 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2942 // testing.
2943 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2944 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2945 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2946 return false;
2947
2948 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2949 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2950 return false;
2951
2952 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2953 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2954 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2955 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2956 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2957 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2958 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2959 //
2960 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2961 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2962 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2963 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2964 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2965 return false;
2966 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2967 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2968 return false;
2969 if (QTB)
2970 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2971 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2972 return false;
2973 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2974 I != E; ++I)
2975 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2976 return false;
2977
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002978 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2979 // sink the store.
2980 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2981 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2982 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2983 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2984 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2985 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2986 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2987 "condstore.split");
2988 if (!NewBB)
2989 return false;
2990 PostBB = NewBB;
2991 }
2992
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002993 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2994 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2995 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2996 ->getCondition();
2997 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2998 ->getCondition();
2999
3000 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3001 PStore->getParent());
3002 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3003 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3004
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003005 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3006
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003007 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3008 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3009
3010 if (InvertPCond)
3011 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3012 if (InvertQCond)
3013 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3014 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3015
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003016 auto *T =
3017 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003018 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3019 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3020 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3021 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3022 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3023 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003024 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3025 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3026 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3027 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3028 unsigned MinAlignment;
3029 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3030 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3031 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3032 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3033 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3034 // store that doesn't execute.
3035 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3036 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3037 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3038 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3039 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3040 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3041 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3042 } else {
3043 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3044 // the stored value.
3045 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3046 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003047
3048 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3049 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003050
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003051 return true;
3052}
3053
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003054static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3055 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003056 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3057 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3058 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3059 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3060 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3061 // PBI and QBI.
3062 //
3063 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3064 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3065 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3066 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3067 //
3068 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3069 //
3070 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3071 // / \ | \
3072 // PTB PFB | PFB
3073 // \ / | /
3074 // QBI QBI
3075 // / \ | \
3076 // QTB QFB | QFB
3077 // \ / | /
3078 // PostBB PostBB
3079 //
3080 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3081 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3082 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003083 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3084 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3085 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3086 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3087 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3088
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003089 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3090 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3091 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3092 PostBB = QFB;
3093
3094 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3095 if (!PostBB)
3096 return false;
3097
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003098 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3099 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3100 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3101 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3102 InvertPCond = true;
3103 }
3104 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3105 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3106 InvertQCond = true;
3107 }
3108
3109 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3110 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3111 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3112 PTB = nullptr;
3113 if (QTB == PostBB)
3114 QTB = nullptr;
3115
3116 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3117 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3118 // predecessor.
3119 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003120 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003121 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003122 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003123 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3124 return false;
3125 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3126 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3127 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003128 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003129 return false;
3130
3131 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3132 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003133 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003134 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3135 if (!BB)
3136 continue;
3137 for (auto &I : *BB)
3138 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3139 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3140 }
3141 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3142 if (!BB)
3143 continue;
3144 for (auto &I : *BB)
3145 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3146 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3147 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003148
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003149 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3150 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3151 // clear what it contains.
3152 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3153
3154 bool Changed = false;
3155 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3156 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003157 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003158 return Changed;
3159}
3160
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003161/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3162/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003163/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3164/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003165static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3166 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003167 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3168 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003169
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003170 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003171 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003172 // this conditional branch redundant.
3173 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3174 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3175 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3176 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3177 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3178 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3179 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003180 BI->setCondition(
3181 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3182 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003183 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003184
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003185 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3186 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3187 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3188 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003189 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003190 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3191 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3192 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003193 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3194 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3195 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003196 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003197 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003198 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3199 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003200 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3201 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003202 NewPN->addIncoming(
3203 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3204 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003205 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003206 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003207 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003208 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003209
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003210 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003211 return true;
3212 }
3213 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003214
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003215 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3216 if (CE->canTrap())
3217 return false;
3218
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003219 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3220 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3221 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003222 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003223 return true;
3224
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003225 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003226 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003227 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003228
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003229 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003230 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003231 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003232
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003233 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003234 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3235 PBIOp = 0;
3236 BIOp = 0;
3237 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3238 PBIOp = 0;
3239 BIOp = 1;
3240 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3241 PBIOp = 1;
3242 BIOp = 0;
3243 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3244 PBIOp = 1;
3245 BIOp = 1;
3246 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003247 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003248 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003249
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3251 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3252 // keep getting unwound.
3253 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3254 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003255
3256 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003257 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3258 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003259
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003260 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3261 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3262 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3263
3264 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003265 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003266 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3267 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003268 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3269 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003270
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3272 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3273 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3274 if (CE->canTrap())
3275 return false;
3276
3277 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3278 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3279 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3280 if (CE->canTrap())
3281 return false;
3282 }
3283
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003284 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003285 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003286
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003287 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003288 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003290 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3291 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3292 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3293 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3294 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3295 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3296 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3297 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3298 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3299 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003300 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3301 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003302 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3303 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003304 }
3305
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003306 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003307
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003308 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3309 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003310
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003311 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3312 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003313 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003314 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003315 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003316
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003317 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3318 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003319 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003320
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003321 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003322 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003323
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003324 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3325 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3326 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3327 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003328
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003329 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3330 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003331 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003332 bool HasWeights =
3333 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3334 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003335 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003336 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3337 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3338 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3339 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003340 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3341 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3342 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003343 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3344 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3345 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003346 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003347 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3348
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003349 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003350 }
3351
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003352 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3353 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003354 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003355
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003356 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3357 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3358 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3359 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003360 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3361 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3362 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3363 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003364 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3365 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003366 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3367 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003368 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003369 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3370 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3371 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3372 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003373 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003374 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3375 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3376 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3377 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3378 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3379 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3380 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3381 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3382
3383 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3384
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003385 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003386 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003387 }
3388 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003389
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003390 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3391 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003392
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003393 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3394 // one fewer predecessor.
3395 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003396}
3397
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003398// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3399// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003400// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3401// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3402// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3403static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003404 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3405 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003406 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003407 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3408 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3409 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3410 // successor.
3411 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003412 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003413
3414 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003415 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003416 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3417 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003418 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003419 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003420 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003421 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003422 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3423 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003424 }
3425
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003426 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3427 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3428
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003429 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003430 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003431 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3432 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3433 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003434 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003435 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003436 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3437 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003438 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3439 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003440 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003441 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003442 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3443 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3444 // terminator must be unreachable.
3445 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3446 } else {
3447 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3448 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3449 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003450 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003451 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003452 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003453 else
3454 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003455 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003456 }
3457
3458 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3459 return true;
3460}
3461
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003462// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003463// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3464// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3465// unconditional otherwise.
3466static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3467 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3468 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3469 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3470 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3471 return false;
3472
3473 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3474 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003475 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3476 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003477
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003478 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3479 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3480 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3481 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3482 if (HasWeights) {
3483 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3484 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003485 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003486 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003487 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003488 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003489 }
3490 }
3491
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003492 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003493 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3494 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003495}
3496
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003497// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003498// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3499// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3500// with
3501// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3502static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3503 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3504 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3505 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3506 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3507 return false;
3508
3509 // Extract the actual blocks.
3510 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3511 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3512
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003513 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003514 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3515 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003516}
3517
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003518/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3519/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003520/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3521/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3522/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3523/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3524/// like:
3525///
3526/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3527/// DEFAULT:
3528/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3529/// br label %end
3530/// end:
3531/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003532///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003533/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3534/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003535static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003536 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003537 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003538 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003539
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003540 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3541 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003542 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3543 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003544
3545 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3546 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003547
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003548 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3549 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3550 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3551 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003552 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3553 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003554
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003555 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3556 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3557 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003558
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003559 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3560 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3561 // away.
3562 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3563 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3564 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3565 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003566
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003567 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003568 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003569 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3570 }
3571 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003572 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003573 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003574
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003575 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3576 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3577 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003578 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003579 Value *V;
3580 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3581 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3582 else
3583 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003584
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003585 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3586 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3587 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003588 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003589 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003590
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003591 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3592 // the block.
3593 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003594 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003595 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003596 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3597 return false;
3598
3599 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3600 // true in the PHI.
3601 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003602 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003603
3604 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3605 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3606
3607 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3608 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3609 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3610 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3611
3612 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3613 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003614 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3615 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003616 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3617 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3618 if (HasWeights) {
3619 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3620 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3621 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003622 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003623 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3624
3625 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003626 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003627 }
3628 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003629 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003630
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003631 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003632 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3633 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3634 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003635 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3636 return true;
3637}
3638
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003639/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003640/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3641/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003642static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3643 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003644 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003645 if (!Cond)
3646 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003647
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003648 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3649 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3650 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003651
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003652 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003653 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3654 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003655 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003656 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3657 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3658 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003659
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003660 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003661 if (!CompVal)
3662 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003663
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003664 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3665 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3666 return false;
3667
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003668 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3669
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003670 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3671 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3672 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3673 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003674
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003675 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003676 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003677 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3678 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003679
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003680 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3681 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3682
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003683 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3684 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003685 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3686 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3687 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003688
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003689 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003690
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003691 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003692 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3693 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003694
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003695 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3696 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3697 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3698 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003699 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3700 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003701 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3702 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003703 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3704
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003705 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003706 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003707 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003708 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003709
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003710 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003711
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003712 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3713 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003714 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003715
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003716 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003717 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003718 BB = NewBB;
3719 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003720
3721 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003722 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3723 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003724 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3725 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003726 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003727
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003728 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003729 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003730
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003731 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3732 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3733 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003734
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003735 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3736 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3737 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003738 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003739 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3740 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003741 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003742 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3743 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003744
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003745 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3746 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003747
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003748 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003749 return true;
3750}
3751
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003752bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003753 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3754 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3755 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3756 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3757 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3758 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003759
3760 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003761}
3762
3763// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3764bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3765 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3766
3767 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3768 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3769 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003770 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003771 while (++I != E)
3772 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3773 return false;
3774
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003775 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003776 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3777
3778 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003779 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3780 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003781 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3782 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3783
3784 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3785 // it has other dependents.
3786 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3787 continue;
3788
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003789 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003790 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3791 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3792 continue;
3793
3794 bool isTrivial = true;
3795
3796 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3797 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3798 while (++I != E)
3799 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3800 isTrivial = false;
3801 break;
3802 }
3803
3804 if (isTrivial)
3805 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3806 }
3807
3808 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003809 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3810 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003811
3812 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3813 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3814 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3815 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3816 // to remove them all.
3817 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3818 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3819
3820 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3821 PI != PE;) {
3822 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3823 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3824 }
3825
3826 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3827 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3828 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3829 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3830 // predecessors.
3831 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3832 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3833 }
3834
3835 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3836 if (pred_empty(BB))
3837 BB->eraseFromParent();
3838
3839 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3840}
3841
3842// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3843bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003844 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3845 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003846 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3847 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003848
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003849 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3850 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003851 while (++I != E)
3852 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3853 return false;
3854
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003855 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003856 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3857 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3858 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003859 }
3860
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003861 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3862 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003863 if (LoopHeaders)
3864 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003865 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003866}
3867
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003868static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003869 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3870 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3871 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3872 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3873 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3874 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3875 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3876 // simplified.
3877 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003878 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3879 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003880 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3881 return false;
3882
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003883 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3884 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3885 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3886 return false;
3887
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003888 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003889 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003890 while (++I != E) {
3891 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3892 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003893 return false;
3894
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003895 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3896 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3897 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3898 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3899 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3900 break;
3901 default:
3902 return false;
3903 }
3904 }
3905
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003906 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3907 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003908 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003909 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003910
3911 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3912 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3913 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3914 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3915 // are both EH pads).
3916 if (UnwindDest) {
3917 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3918 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003919 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003920 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003921 I != IE; ++I) {
3922 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003923
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003924 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003925 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003926 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003927 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3928 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3929 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3930 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3931 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3932 // pad being removed.
3933 //
3934 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3935 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3936 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3937 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3938 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3939 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3940
3941 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3942 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3943
3944 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3945 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3946 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3947 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003948 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003949 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003950 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3951 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3952 }
3953 } else {
3954 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3955 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3956 // predecessors with this value.
3957 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3958 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3959 }
3960 }
3961 }
3962
3963 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003964 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003965 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3966 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003967 I != IE;) {
3968 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3969 // being moved to another block.
3970 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3971 if (PN->use_empty())
3972 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3973 // when we erase BB below.
3974 continue;
3975
3976 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3977 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3978 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3979 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3980 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3981 if (pred != BB)
3982 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3983 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3984 }
3985 }
3986
3987 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3988 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3989 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003990 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003991 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003992 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003993 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003994 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003995 }
3996 }
3997
3998 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3999 BB->eraseFromParent();
4000 return true;
4001}
4002
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004003// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4004static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4005 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4006 // with.
4007 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4008 if (!UnwindDest)
4009 return false;
4010
4011 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4012 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4013 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4014 return false;
4015
4016 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4017 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4018 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4019 return false;
4020
4021 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4022 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4023 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4024 // funclet bundle operands.
4025 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4026 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4027 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4028 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4029 // destination.
4030 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4031 RI->eraseFromParent();
4032
4033 return true;
4034}
4035
4036bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004037 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4038 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4039 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4040 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4041 return false;
4042
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004043 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004044 return true;
4045
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004046 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004047 return true;
4048
4049 return false;
4050}
4051
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004052bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004053 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004054 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4055 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004056
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004057 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004058 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4059 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004060 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4061 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004062 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4063 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4064 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4065 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4066 else
4067 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4068 }
4069 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004070
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004071 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004072 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004073 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4074 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4075 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004076 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004077 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004078 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004079
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004080 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004081 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004082 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4083 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004084 if (LoopHeaders)
4085 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004086 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004087
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004088 return true;
4089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004090
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004091 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4092 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4093 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4094 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4095 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004096
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004097 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4098 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4099 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004100 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004101 return true;
4102 }
4103 return false;
4104}
4105
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004106bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4107 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004108
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004110
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004111 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4112 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004113 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4114 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004115 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004116 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4117 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4118 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004119 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4120 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004121
4122 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004123 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004124 if (SI->isVolatile())
4125 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004126 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004127 if (LI->isVolatile())
4128 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004129 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004130 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4131 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004132 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004133 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4134 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004135 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4136 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4137 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4138 // default.
4139 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4140 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4141 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4142 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004143 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4144 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004145 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004146 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004147 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4148 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4149 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4150 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004151 }
4152
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004153 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4154 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4155 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004156 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004157 Changed = true;
4158 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004159
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004160 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4161 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004162 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4163 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004164
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004165 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004166 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4167 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004168 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004169 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004170 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4171 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4172 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4173 TI->eraseFromParent();
4174 Changed = true;
4175 }
4176 } else {
4177 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004178 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004179 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4180 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004181 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004182 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4183 Changed = true;
4184 }
4185 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004186 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004187 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004188 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004189 ++i;
4190 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004191 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004192 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4193 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4194 e = SI->case_end();
4195 Changed = true;
4196 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004197 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4198 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4199 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4200 Changed = true;
4201 }
4202 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4203 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4204 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4205 Changed = true;
4206 continue;
4207 }
4208
4209 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4210 E = CSI->handler_end();
4211 I != E; ++I) {
4212 if (*I == BB) {
4213 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4214 --I;
4215 --E;
4216 Changed = true;
4217 }
4218 }
4219 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4220 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4221 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4222 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4223 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4224 } else {
4225 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4226 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4227 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4228 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4229 }
4230 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4231 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4232 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4233 Changed = true;
4234 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004235 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004236 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4237 TI->eraseFromParent();
4238 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004239 }
4240 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004241
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004242 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004243 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004244 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4245 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004246 if (LoopHeaders)
4247 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004248 return true;
4249 }
4250
4251 return Changed;
4252}
4253
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004254static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4255 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4256
4257 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4258 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4259 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4260 return false;
4261 }
4262 return true;
4263}
4264
4265/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4266/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004267static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004268 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004269
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004270 bool HasDefault =
4271 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004272
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004273 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4274 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4275 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004276 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4277 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004278
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004279 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4280 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004281 if (!DestA)
4282 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004283 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004284 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004285 continue;
4286 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004287 if (!DestB)
4288 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004289 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004290 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004291 continue;
4292 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004293 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004294 }
4295
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004296 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4297 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004298 assert(DestA != DestB);
4299 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4300 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4301 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4302
4303 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4304 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4305 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4306 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4307 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4308 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4309 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4310 OtherDest = DestB;
4311 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4312 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4313 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4314 OtherDest = DestA;
4315 } else
4316 return false;
4317
4318 // Start building the compare and branch.
4319
4320 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004321 Constant *NumCases =
4322 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004323
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004324 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4325 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004326 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4327
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004328 Value *Cmp;
4329 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004330 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004331 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4332 else
4333 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004334 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004335
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004336 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004337 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4338 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004339 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4340 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004341 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4342 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4343 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4344 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4345 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4346 else
4347 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4348 }
4349 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4350 TrueWeight /= 2;
4351 FalseWeight /= 2;
4352 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004353 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004354 }
4355 }
4356
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004357 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4358 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4359 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004360 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4361 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004362 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004363 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4364 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004365 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4366 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004367 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4368 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004369 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4370 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4371 }
4372
4373 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004374 SI->eraseFromParent();
4375
4376 return true;
4377}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004378
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004379/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004380/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004381static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004382 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004383 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004384 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004385 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004386
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004387 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4388 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4389 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004390 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004391 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4392
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004393 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004394 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004395 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004396 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004397 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004398 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004399 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004400 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004401 }
4402 }
4403
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004404 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4405 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004406 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4407 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004408 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004409 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4410 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004411 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004412 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004413 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004414 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004415 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004416 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004417 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4418 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004419 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4420 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004421 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4422 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4423 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4424 return true;
4425 }
4426
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004427 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4428 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4429 if (HasWeight) {
4430 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4431 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4432 }
4433
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004434 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004435 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004436 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4437 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004438 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004439 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004440 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004441 Weights.pop_back();
4442 }
4443
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004444 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004445 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4446 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004447 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004448 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004449 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004450 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004451 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004452
4453 return !DeadCases.empty();
4454}
4455
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004456/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4457/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004458/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4459/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4460/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4461static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004462 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004463 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004464 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004465 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004466 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004467
4468 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4469 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004470 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004471
4472 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4473
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004474 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4475 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004476 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4477
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004478 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004479 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4480 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004481
4482 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004483 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004484 }
4485
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004486 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004487}
4488
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004489/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4490/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004491/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004492static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004493 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4494
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004495 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004496 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4497 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004498 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004499 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4500 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004501
4502 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4503 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4504 // switchbb:
4505 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4506 // i32 17, label %succ
4507 // ...
4508 // succ:
4509 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4510 // -->
4511 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4512
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004513 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004514 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4515 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4516 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4517 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4518 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004519 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4520 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4521 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4522 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004523 Changed = true;
4524 }
4525 }
4526
4527 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004528 int PhiIdx;
4529 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4530 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004531 }
4532
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004533 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4534 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4535 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004536 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4537 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004538
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004539 for (int Index : Indexes)
4540 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004541 Changed = true;
4542 }
4543
4544 return Changed;
4545}
4546
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004547/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004548/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004549static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004550 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4551 return false;
4552 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4553 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004554
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004555 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4556 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4557 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4558 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004559
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004560 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004561 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4562 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004563 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4564 return false;
4565 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004566
4567 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4568 return false;
4569
4570 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004571}
4572
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004573/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004574/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004575static Constant *
4576LookupConstant(Value *V,
4577 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004578 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4579 return C;
4580 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4581}
4582
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004583/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004584/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4585/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004586/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004587static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004588ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4589 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004590 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004591 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4592 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004593 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004594 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4595 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4596 if (A->isNullValue())
4597 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004598 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004599 }
4600
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004601 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4602 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4603 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4604 COps.push_back(A);
4605 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004606 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004607 }
4608
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004609 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004610 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4611 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004612 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004613
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004614 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004615}
4616
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004617/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004618/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004619/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004620/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004621static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004622GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004623 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004624 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004625 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004626 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4627 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4628
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004629 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4630 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004631 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004632 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004633 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
4634 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(&I)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004635 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004636 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004637 return false;
4638 Pred = CaseDest;
4639 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004640 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004641 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004642
4643 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4644 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4645 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004646 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004647 User *User = Use.getUser();
4648 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4649 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4650 continue;
4651 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4652 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4653 continue;
4654 return false;
4655 }
4656
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004657 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004658 } else {
4659 break;
4660 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004661 }
4662
4663 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4664 if (!*CommonDest)
4665 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4666 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4667 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4668 return false;
4669
4670 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004671 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4672 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004673 if (Idx == -1)
4674 continue;
4675
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004676 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004677 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004678 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004679 return false;
4680
4681 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004682 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004683 return false;
4684
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004685 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004686 }
4687
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004688 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004689}
4690
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004691// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004692// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4693static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4694 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4695 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004696 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4697 if (I.first == Result) {
4698 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004699 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004700 }
4701 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004702 UniqueResults.push_back(
4703 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004704 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004705}
4706
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004707// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004708// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4709// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4710// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004711static bool
4712InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4713 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4714 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4715 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4716 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004717 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4718 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4719
4720 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4721 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4722 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004723 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004724 return false;
4725
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004726 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004727 if (Results.size() > 1)
4728 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004729
4730 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4731 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4732 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4733
4734 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4735 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4736 return false;
4737
4738 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4739 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4740 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004741
4742 // Check the PHI consistency.
4743 if (!PHI)
4744 PHI = Results[0].first;
4745 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4746 return false;
4747 }
4748 // Find the default result value.
4749 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4750 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4751 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004752 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004753 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4754 // is unreachable.
4755 DefaultResult =
4756 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4757 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004758 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004759 return false;
4760
4761 return true;
4762}
4763
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004764// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4765// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004766// Example:
4767// switch (a) {
4768// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4769// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4770// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4771// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4772// default:
4773// return 4;
4774// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004775static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4776 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4777 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004778 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004779 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004780 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4781 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4782 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4783 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4784 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4785 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4786
4787 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4788 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4789 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4790 Value *const ValueCompare =
4791 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4792 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4793 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4794 }
4795 Value *const ValueCompare =
4796 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004797 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4798 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004799 }
4800
4801 return nullptr;
4802}
4803
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004804// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4805// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004806static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4807 Value *SelectValue,
4808 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4809 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4810 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4811 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4812 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4813
4814 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4815
4816 // Remove the switch.
4817 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4818 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4819
4820 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4821 continue;
4822 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4823 }
4824 SI->eraseFromParent();
4825}
4826
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004827/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004828/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4829/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004830static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4831 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004832 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004833 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4834 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4835 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4836 Constant *DefaultResult;
4837 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4838 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004839 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004840 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004841 return false;
4842 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4843 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4844 return false;
4845 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4846
4847 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004848 Value *SelectValue =
4849 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004850 if (SelectValue) {
4851 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4852 return true;
4853 }
4854 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4855 return false;
4856}
4857
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004858namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004859
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004860/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4861class SwitchLookupTable {
4862public:
4863 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4864 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4865 SwitchLookupTable(
4866 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4867 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004868 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004869
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004870 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4871 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4872 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004873
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004874 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4875 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4876 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4877 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004878
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004879private:
4880 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4881 // different ways.
4882 enum {
4883 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4884 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4885 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004886
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004887 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4888 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4889 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4890 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004891
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004892 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4893 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4894 // shift and mask operations.
4895 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004896
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004897 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4898 // instructions from the table.
4899 ArrayKind
4900 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004901
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004902 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004903 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004904
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004905 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004906 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4907 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004908
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004909 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004910 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4911 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004912
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004913 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004914 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004915};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004916
4917} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004918
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004919SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4920 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4921 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004922 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004923 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4924 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004925
4926 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004927 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004928
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004929 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4930
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004931 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004932 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004933 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4934 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4935 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004936 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004937
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004938 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004939 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4940
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004941 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004942 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004943 }
4944
4945 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004946 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004947 assert(DefaultValue &&
4948 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004949 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004950 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4951 if (!TableContents[I])
4952 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004953 }
4954
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004955 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004956 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004957 }
4958
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004959 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4960 // that single value.
4961 if (SingleValue) {
4962 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4963 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004964 }
4965
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004966 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4967 // table index.
4968 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4969 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4970 APInt PrevVal;
4971 APInt DistToPrev;
4972 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4973 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4974 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4975 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4976 if (!ConstVal) {
4977 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4978 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4979 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4980 break;
4981 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004982 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004983 if (I != 0) {
4984 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4985 if (I == 1) {
4986 DistToPrev = Dist;
4987 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4988 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4989 break;
4990 }
4991 }
4992 PrevVal = Val;
4993 }
4994 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4995 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4996 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4997 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4998 ++NumLinearMaps;
4999 return;
5000 }
5001 }
5002
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005003 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005004 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005005 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005006 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5007 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5008 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005009 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5010 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5011 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5012 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5013 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005014 }
5015 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5016 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5017 Kind = BitMapKind;
5018 ++NumBitMaps;
5019 return;
5020 }
5021
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005022 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005023 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005024 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5025
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005026 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5027 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005028 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005029 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005030 Kind = ArrayKind;
5031}
5032
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005033Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005034 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005035 case SingleValueKind:
5036 return SingleValue;
5037 case LinearMapKind: {
5038 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5039 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5040 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5041 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5042 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5043 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5044 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5045 return Result;
5046 }
5047 case BitMapKind: {
5048 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5049 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005050
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005051 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5052 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5053 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5054 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005055
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005056 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5057 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5058 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5059 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005060
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005061 // Shift down.
5062 Value *DownShifted =
5063 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5064 // Mask off.
5065 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5066 }
5067 case ArrayKind: {
5068 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5069 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5070 uint64_t TableSize =
5071 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5072 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5073 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5074 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5075 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005076
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005077 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5078 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5079 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5080 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5081 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005082 }
5083 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5084}
5085
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005086bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005087 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005088 Type *ElementType) {
5089 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005090 if (!IT)
5091 return false;
5092 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5093 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005094
5095 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005096 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005097 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005098 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005099}
5100
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005101/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5102/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005103static bool
5104ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5105 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5106 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005107 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5108 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005109
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005110 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005111 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005112 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5113 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005114
5115 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005116 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005117
5118 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005119 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5120 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5121 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005122
5123 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5124 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5125 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5126 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005127 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005128 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005129
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005130 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5131 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5132 return true;
5133
5134 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5135 if (HasIllegalType)
5136 return false;
5137
5138 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5139 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5140 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5141 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005142}
5143
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005144/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5145/// \code
5146/// if (idx < tablesize)
5147/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5148/// else
5149/// r = default_value;
5150/// if (r != default_value)
5151/// ...
5152/// \endcode
5153/// Is optimized to:
5154/// \code
5155/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5156/// if (cond)
5157/// r = table[idx];
5158/// else
5159/// r = default_value;
5160/// if (cond)
5161/// ...
5162/// \endcode
5163/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005164static void reuseTableCompare(
5165 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5166 Constant *DefaultValue,
5167 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005168 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5169 if (!CmpInst)
5170 return;
5171
5172 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5173 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5174 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5175 return;
5176
5177 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5178 if (!CmpOp1)
5179 return;
5180
5181 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5182 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5183 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5184
5185 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5186 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5187 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5188 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5189 return;
5190
5191 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5192 // compare result.
5193 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5194 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005195 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005196 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005197 return;
5198 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5199 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5200 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005201
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005202 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5203 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5204 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5205 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5206 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5207 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5208 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5209 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5210 return;
5211 }
5212
5213 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5214 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5215 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5216 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5217 } else {
5218 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005219 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5220 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5221 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005222 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5223 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5224 }
5225}
5226
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005227/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5228/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5229/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005230static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5231 const DataLayout &DL,
5232 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005233 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005234
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005235 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5236 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5237 // attribute is not set.
5238 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5239 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005240 return false;
5241
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005242 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5243 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5244
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005245 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5246 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5247 // string and lookup indices into that.
5248
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005249 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005250 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005251 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005252 return false;
5253
5254 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005255 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005256 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5257 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005258 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5259 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005260
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005261 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005262
5263 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005264 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005265
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005266 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5267 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5268 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005269
5270 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005271 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005272 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5273 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5274 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5275 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5276
5277 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005278 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005279 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005280 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005281 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005282 return false;
5283
5284 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005285 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5286 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5287 Constant *Value = I.second;
5288 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5289 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5290 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005291 }
5292 }
5293
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005294 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005295 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005296 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5297 }
5298
5299 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5300 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5301 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5302 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5303
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005304 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5305 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005306 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005307 bool HasDefaultResults =
5308 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5309 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005310
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005311 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5312 if (NeedMask) {
5313 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005314 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005315 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005316 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005317 return false;
5318 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005319
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005320 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5321 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5322 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005323 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005324 }
5325
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005326 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005327 return false;
5328
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005329 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005330 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005331 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5332 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005333
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005334 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005335 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005336 Value *TableIndex;
5337 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5338 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5339 else
5340 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5341 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005342
5343 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5344 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005345 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005346 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005347 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5348 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5349 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5350
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005351 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5352 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5353 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5354 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5355 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5356 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005357 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5358
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005359 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005360 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005361 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5362 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005363 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005364 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5365 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5366 RangeCheckBranch =
5367 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005368 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005369
5370 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5371 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005372
5373 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005374 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5375 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005376 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5377 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005378 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5379 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005380
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005381 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005382 // unnecessary illegal types.
5383 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5384 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5385 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005386 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005387 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5388 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005389 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5390 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005391 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5392 }
5393 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5394
5395 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5396 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5397 // else continue with table lookup.
5398 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005399 Value *MaskIndex =
5400 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5401 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5402 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5403 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005404 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5405
5406 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5407 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5408 }
5409
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005410 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005411 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005412 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5413 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5414 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5415 }
5416
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005417 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005418 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5419 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005420 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005421
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005422 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5423 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005424 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005425 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5426 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005427
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005428 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005429
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005430 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5431 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005432 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5433 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005434 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5435 ReturnedEarly = true;
5436 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005437 }
5438
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005439 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5440 // possible.
5441 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5442 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5443 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5444 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5445 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5446 }
5447 }
5448
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005449 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005450 }
5451
5452 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5453 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5454
5455 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005456 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005457 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005458
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005459 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005460 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005461 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5462 }
5463 SI->eraseFromParent();
5464
5465 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005466 if (NeedMask)
5467 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005468 return true;
5469}
5470
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005471static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5472 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5473 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5474 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5475 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5476 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5477 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005478
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005479 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5480}
5481
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005482/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5483/// of cases.
5484///
5485/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5486/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5487///
5488/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5489/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005490static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5491 const DataLayout &DL,
5492 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5493 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5494 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5495 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5496 return false;
5497 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5498 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5499 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5500 return false;
5501
5502 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5503 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5504 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5505 // as signed.
5506 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5507 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5508 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Mandeep Singh Grang636d94d2018-04-13 19:47:57 +00005509 llvm::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005510
5511 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5512 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5513 return false;
5514
5515 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5516 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5517 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005518 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005519
5520 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5521 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5522 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5523 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5524 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005525 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005526
5527 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5528 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5529 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5530 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5531 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5532 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5533 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5534 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005535 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005536 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5537 return false;
5538
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005539 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005540 for (auto &V : Values)
5541 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5542
5543 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5544 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5545 return false;
5546
5547 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5548 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5549 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5550 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5551 //
5552 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5553 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5554 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5555 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005556
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005557 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5558 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5559 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5560 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005561 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5562 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5563 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005564 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5565
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005566 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5567 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005568 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005569 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005570 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005571 }
5572 return true;
5573}
5574
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005575bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005576 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5577
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005578 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5579 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5580 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5581 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5582 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005583 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005584
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005585 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5586 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5587 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005588 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005589
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005590 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5591 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005592 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005593 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005594 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005595 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005596
5597 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005598 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005599 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005600
5601 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005602 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
5603 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005604
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005605 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5606 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005607
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005608 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005609 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005610
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005611 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5612 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5613 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5614 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5615 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005616 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5617 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005618 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005619
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005620 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005621 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005622
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005623 return false;
5624}
5625
5626bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5627 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5628 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005629
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005630 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5631 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5632 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5633 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005634 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005635 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5636 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005637 --i;
5638 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005639 Changed = true;
5640 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005641 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005642
5643 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5644 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5645 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5646 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5647 return true;
5648 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005649
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005650 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5651 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5652 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5653 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5654 return true;
5655 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005656
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005657 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5658 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005659 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005660 }
5661 return Changed;
5662}
5663
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005664/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5665/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5666/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5667/// a shared handler.
5668///
5669/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5670/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5671/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5672/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5673/// sinking in this file)
5674///
5675/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5676/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5677/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5678/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5679/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5680/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5681///
5682/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5683/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5684/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5685static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5686 BasicBlock *BB) {
5687 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5688 assert(Succ);
5689 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5690 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5691 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5692 return false;
5693
5694 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5695 if (BB == OtherPred)
5696 continue;
5697 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5698 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5699 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5700 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005701 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5702 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005703 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5704 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5705 continue;
5706
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005707 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005708 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5709 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5710 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5711 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5712 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005713 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5714 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005715 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5716 }
5717
5718 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5719 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005720 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5721 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5722 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005723 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5724 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5725 }
5726
5727 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5728 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5729 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5730 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5731 }
5732
5733 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5734 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5735 BI->eraseFromParent();
5736 return true;
5737 }
5738 return false;
5739}
5740
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005741bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5742 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005743 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005744 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005745
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005746 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005747 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5748 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005749 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5750 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005751 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5752 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005753 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005754 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005755 (LoopHeaders && std::distance(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)) > 1 &&
5756 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005757 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005758 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005759 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005760 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005761
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005762 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5763 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5765 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5766 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5767 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005768 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005769 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005770 return true;
5771 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005772
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005773 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5774 // equivalent.
5775 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005776 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5777 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005778 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005779 return true;
5780 }
5781
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005782 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5783 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5784 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5785 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005786 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005787 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005788 return false;
5789}
5790
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005791static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5792 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5793 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5794 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5795 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5796 return nullptr;
5797 PredPred = PPred;
5798 }
5799 return PredPred;
5800}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005801
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005802bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005803 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005804 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5805 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5806 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005807
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005808 // Conditional branch
5809 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5810 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5811 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5812 // switch.
5813 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005814 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005815 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005816
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005817 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5818 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005819 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005820 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005821 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005822 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005823 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005824 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005825 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005826 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005827 }
5828 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005829
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005830 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005831 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005832 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005833
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005834 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5835 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5836 // of the BI branch.
5837 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5838 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5839 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005840 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5841 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005842 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005843 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005844 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005845 if (Implication) {
5846 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5847 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5848 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5849 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5850 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5851 BI->setCondition(CI);
5852 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005853 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005854 }
5855 }
5856 }
5857
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005858 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5859 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5860 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005861 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005862 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005863
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005864 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5865 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5866 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5867 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005868 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5869 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005870 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005871 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005872 } else {
5873 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005874 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005875 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5876 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5877 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005878 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005879 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005880 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005881 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005882 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005883 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005884 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5885 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5886 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005887 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005888 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005889 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005890
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005891 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5892 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5893 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5894 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005895 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
5896 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005897
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005898 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005899 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5900 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005901 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005902 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005903 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005904
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005905 // Look for diamond patterns.
5906 if (MergeCondStores)
5907 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5908 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5909 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005910 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005911 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005912
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005913 return false;
5914}
5915
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005916/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5917static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5918 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5919 if (!C)
5920 return false;
5921
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005922 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005923 return false;
5924
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005925 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005926 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005927 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005928
5929 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5930 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005931 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5932 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5933 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5934 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005935 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005936 return false;
5937
5938 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5939 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5940 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5941 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5942
5943 // Look through bitcasts.
5944 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5945 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5946
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005947 // Load from null is undefined.
5948 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005949 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5950 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005951
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005952 // Store to null is undefined.
5953 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005954 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005955 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5956 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005957
5958 // A call to null is undefined.
5959 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5960 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005961 }
5962 return false;
5963}
5964
5965/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005966/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005967static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005968 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5969 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5970 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
5971 TerminatorInst *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005972 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5973 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005974 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005975 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5976 // destination from conditional branches.
5977 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5978 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5979 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005980 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5981 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005982 BI->eraseFromParent();
5983 return true;
5984 }
5985 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5986 }
5987
5988 return false;
5989}
5990
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005991bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005992 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005993
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005994 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005995 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005996
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005997 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5998 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005999 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006000 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006001 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
6002 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6003 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006004 }
6005
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006006 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6007 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006008 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006009
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006010 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6011 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6012
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006013 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6014 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6015
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006016 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6017 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6018 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006019 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6020 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006021
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006022 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6023 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6024
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006025 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6026
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006027 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6028 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006029 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006030 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006031 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006032
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006033 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006034 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006035 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006036 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6037 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006038 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006039 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6040 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006041 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006042 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006043 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6044 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006045 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006046 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6047 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006048 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006049 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6050 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006051 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006052 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6053 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006054 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006055 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6056 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006057 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006058 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6059 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006060 }
6061
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006062 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006063}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006064
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006065bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6066 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006067 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006068 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006069 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006070 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006071}